Samsung | PS-50P91FH | Samsung PS-63P71FH دليل المستخدم

‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪PDP -‬‬
‫)ﭘﻨﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ(‬
‫‪SRS TruSurround XT‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ www.samsung.com/global/register‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻣﺪﻝ _______________ ▪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ _______________‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:21‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫”ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ“ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ًﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ PDP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﻛﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺣﺬﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ”ﺗﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻖ“ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ”ﺗﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻖ“ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ PDP‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ (SD-level)١,٢٣٠,٠٠٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (HD-level)٣,١۵٠,٠٠٠‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ۴١‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﻞ ‪ PDP‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪” ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ“ ﻭ ”ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ“ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫© ‪.Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved 2007‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:21‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ‪٢ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‪۴ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪۴ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪۵ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪۶ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪١٠................................................................‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ‪١٠...................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ‪١٠.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪١٢..............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪١٢...................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪١٣......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪١٣...........................................‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪١۶............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪١۶...................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٧.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ‪١٧.............................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٨..........................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٩.......................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ )‪ / (Digital NR‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪ / (Active Colour‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ / (DNIe‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫)‪٢٠........................................................... (Movie Plus‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‪٢١............................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‪٢٢.......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪٢٣...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪/(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(Blue Screen‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ)‪/(Melody‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ)‪/(Light Effect‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪ /(Energy Saving‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪HDMI Black‬‬
‫‪٢۴........................................................... (Level)HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ‪٢۵......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( )‪٢۶ .. (PS-50P91FH‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪٢٧.........................................(PIP‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢٨.......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪٢٩............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪٢٩............. (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪٣٠...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪٣١...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‪٣٢.............................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ‪٣٣........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪٣٣..................................................Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪٣۴........................................................... Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪٣۴...................... Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪٣۵.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪٣۶.........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪٣۶...........‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ‪٣٧.........................................WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪٣٨........................................ WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪٣٩................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪۴٣..................................................Mp3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‪۴۴..................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ( ‪۴۶.......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪۴٨....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ‪۵٣........................( VESA‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ( ‪۵۴................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ ‪۵۴....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪۵۵....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:22‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﭻ )ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﺪﺩ(‬
‫)‪ PS-50P91FH‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪AAA‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪Side-AV/S-Video‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺛﺒﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ )ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪S-Video‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ )ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،S-Video‬ﮔﻮﺷﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ‪ PDP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ PDP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ PDP‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪°٢٠ ~ °٢٠-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:27‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 4‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ )ﻳﺎ ﭘﻬﻠﻮ(‬
‫)‪(PS-50P91FH‬‬
‫)‪(PS-63P71FH‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ )‪,TV, AV١‬‬
‫‪) S-Video ,AV٢‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪) Component١ ,‬ﺟﺰﺀ‪,(١‬‬
‫‪) Component٢‬ﺟﺰء‪) PC, HDMI١ ,(٢‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ‪,‬‬
‫‪HDMI٢‬ﻭ ‪.(HDMI٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪.(PS-50P91FH‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫)ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪− VOL +‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ − VOL +‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ −‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۵ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:34‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 5‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN 3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ S-VIDEO) AV IN 2‬ﻳﺎ ‪(AUDIO R/L / VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ S-Video‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (Video‬ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻮﺭﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫)‪ (JPEG‬ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (Mp3‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۶ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:36‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 6‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺖ‬‫ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻭﭘﺎﺷﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻳﻚ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪١٫٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ ٢ HDMI IN‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVI IN‬‬
‫‪ [R-AUDIO-L] ((HDMI٢‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVI IN (HDMI 2) AUDIO R/L‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ANT IN‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ٧۵Ω‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN 1‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(AUDIO / PC) PC IN‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪SERVICE‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT IN 2, COMPONENT IN 1‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ)‪ (Y/PB/PR‬ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (AUDIO R/L‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫‪(AUDIO R/L / VIDEO) AV IN 1‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ A/V‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻮﺭﺩﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(AUDIO R/L) AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN 2‬‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ‪ DVI‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ DVI‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭ ﺟﺰء‬
‫‪1080p 1080i 720p‬‬
‫‪480i‬‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫‪576i‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫‪HDMI/DVI 50Hz‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪HDMI/DVI 60Hz‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٧ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:40‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 7‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ,Channel, Volume, STOP‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ‪/‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۵‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪:‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢١‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪TruSurround XT‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ )‪ ،STB،CABLE ،DVD ،TV‬ﻭ‬
‫‪(VCR‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺖ ‪VOL،‬‬
‫‪ CH‬ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ )‪DVD ،TV‬‬
‫‪ ،STB ،CABLE‬ﻭ ‪ (VCR‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪،(JPEG) ٣٩‬‬
‫‪ (Mp3) ۴٣‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪/‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫‪:‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫‪:‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻻﺯﻡ‪ /‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ‪ +‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ . +‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴۶‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪Fastext‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ /‬ﻣﻴﮑﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻫﺮﺩﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫)‪(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫‪: P‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫‪: P‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٨ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:47‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 8‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ AAA‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ”‪ “+‬ﻭ ”–“ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﻠﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﮕﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻮﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ! ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻬﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ ۵٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ”ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٣‬ﻭﻳﺎ ”ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۴‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ”ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ“ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭ ‪ ١١‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٩ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:51‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 9‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ ,(Picture‬ﺻﺪﺍ)‪,(Sound‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ ,(Channel‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪.(Input‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ STILL‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ (Start Plug & Play.)Plug & Play‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪ (Language‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪ (Language‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪ (Language‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (Select Home Mode when installing this TV at home.‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٠ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:55‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 10‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﻪ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﺷﺮﻗﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﮓ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫▼‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪C -- P 1‬‬
‫‪0 %‬‬
‫‪40MHz‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪am/pm‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪-- :‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪-‬‬‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ‪ Plug & Play‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪ (TV‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ)‪ (Shop‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ)‪(Home‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺘﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ )ﻣﻨﺰﻝ( ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ)‪ (Area‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ (Auto Store‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ (Clock Set‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ)‪ (Stop‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﻩ)‪ ,(Month‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ ,(Day‬ﺳﺎﻝ)‪,(Year‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ ,(Hour‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ)‪ (Minute‬ﻳﺎ ‪ am/pm‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ)‪ ,(Month‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ ,(Day‬ﺳﺎﻝ)‪ ,(Year‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ (Hour‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ)‪ (Minute‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ (Enjoy your viewing).‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪.Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ (Start Plug & Play.)Plug & Play‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١١ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:00‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 11‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪ (Input‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Source List‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪,Component1 ,S-Video ,AV2 ,AV1 ,TV :‬‬
‫‪ ,Component2‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪HDMI3, HDMI2 ,HDMI1 ,(PC‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫‪HDMI3‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TV‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪ (Input‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Edit Name‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER/OK‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ,D-VHS ,DVD , (VCR)VCD /‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ)‪ ,HD STB ,(Cable STB‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ)‪,(Satellite STB‬‬
‫‪ ,AV Receiver‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ,(DVD Receiver)DVD‬ﺑﺎﺯی)‪,(Game‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی)‪ ,DHS ,DVD Combo ,(Camcorder‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪(PC‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ‪ ١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ۶٠Hz‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ٢ HDMI IN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDMI١‬ﺩﺭ ‪Edit‬‬
‫‪)Name‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ( ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Input‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDMI٢‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫‪HDMI3‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪−−−− −−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪VCD /‬‬
‫‪DVD −−−− :‬‬
‫‪D-VHS −−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ‬
‫‪HD STB−−−− :‬‬
‫‪ −−−− :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫‪▼ −−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٢ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:04‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ)‪ (Area‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ (Auto Store‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی‬
‫ﻏﺮﺑﯽﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﻪ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﺷﺮﻗﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﮓ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻻﻧﺪﻧﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻧﺰی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎی ﺟﻨﻮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪0 %‬‬
‫‪P 1‬‬
‫‪40MHz‬‬
‫‪C --‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ)‪ (Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺵ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C83‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C80‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٣ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:09‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ)‪ (Manual Store‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪) (Programme‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ :(Colour System‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪/(Auto‬ﭘﺎﻝ)‪/(PAL‬ﺳﮑﺎﻡ)‪NTSC3.58/NTSC4.43/(SECAM‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ)‪M/I/DK/BG :(BG/DK/I/M‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪) (Channel‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) C‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ( ﻳﺎ ‪) S‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ)‪) (Search‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺗﻮﻧﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ)‪) (Store‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪)OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪P1:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪BG :‬‬
‫‪C2:‬‬
‫‪48MHz :‬‬
‫‪?:‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) P ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ P٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ P٩٩‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) C ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) S ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١۴ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:11‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel Manager‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel Manager‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Channel List‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ)‪(Channel List‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺑﻪ ) ( ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪(Child Lock‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Channel List‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ) ( ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪ (Child Lock‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪1/10‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪C-‬‬‫‪0‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C 83‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C 80‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C 89‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪C 90‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪C 11‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪C 12‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪C 13‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫▲‬
‫▼‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ CH LIST‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١۵ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:14‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 15‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪−−C‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C83‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C80‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪−−−−−A‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Name‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ,/ ,* ,- ,+ ,٩~٠ ,A~Z :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER/OK‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ)‪ (Fine Tune‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ ، ٠‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ (Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ” * “ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫*‪P 1‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪*P 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫‪−− : −−‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١۶ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:18‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ (Mode‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ ,(Dynamic‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪,(Standard‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪(Movie‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪،RF‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰء‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ‪(DVI‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ‪١‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ (Dynamic‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ P.MODE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ (Mode‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ ,(Dynamic‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪,(Standard‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪(Movie‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ‪١‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ)‪ – (Contrast‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ)‪– (Brightness‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ)‪ – (Sharpness‬ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ – (Colour‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ)‪(Tint‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ AV، S-Video ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ)‪ (Tint‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ‪١‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ‪١‬‬
‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ)‪ – (Contrast‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ)‪ – (Brightness‬ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪(Colour Tone‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ‪١‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ►‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ : (Colour Tone‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪ / (Cool2)٢‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪(Cool1)١‬‬
‫‪ /‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ)‪ / (Normal‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ / (Warm1)١‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪(Warm2)٢‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ (Dynamic‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪)Warm1‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ (١‬ﻭ‬
‫‪)Warm2‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ :(Reset‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ)‪(OK/Cancel‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ)‪ (OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٧ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:21‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 17‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ)‪ (Detailed Settings‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ)‪ ,(Black Adjust‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ ,(Dynamic Contrast‬ﮔﺎﻣﺎ)‪ ,(Gamma‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪White‬‬
‫‪ ,(Balance‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ ,(My Colour Control‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ)‪Edge‬‬
‫‪ ,(Enhancement‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ )‪.xvYCC (Colour Space‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪(Standard‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ)‪ (Detailed Settings‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ DNIe‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ)‪ (Demo‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Picture‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ)‪ (Detailed Settings‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ)‪ :(Black Adjust‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ :(Dynamic Contrast‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻣﺎ)‪+3 ~ -3 :(Gamma‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ :(White Balance‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(B-Offset‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Gain‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Gain‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪(B-Gain‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(B-Offset‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Gain‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Gain‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪:(B-Gain‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ :(Reset‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ :(My Colour Control‬ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪/‬ﺁﺑﻲ‪/‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪/‬ﺁﺑﻲ‪/‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ ،(My Colour Control‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ :(Reset‬ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ)‪ :(Edge Enhancement‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﮐﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ :(Colour Space‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ / (Auto‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ)‪(Wide‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ (Auto‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ)‪ (Wide‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :xvYCC‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ xvYCC‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ Component IN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (Picture Mode‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ )‪ (Movie‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪xvYCC‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪0 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٨ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:23‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 18‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)‪ (Size‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪,16 : 9 :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻱ)‪,(Wide Zoom‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪,4:3, (Zoom‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ)‪(Just Scan‬‬
‫‪ :16 : 9 ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻱ )‪ :(Wide Zoom‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ‪ ، ENTER/OK‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ )‪ :(Zoom‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4 : 3 ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ)‪:(Just Scan‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪،١٠٨٠i ،٧٢٠p HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٨٠p‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪)Just Scan HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ( ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AV‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪16 : 9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪16 : 9‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ P.SIZE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (ZOOM‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٩ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:25‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 19‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ)‪ / (Digital NR‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ)‪/ (Active Colour‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ / (DNIe‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ)‪(Movie Plus‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ)‪/ (Digital NR‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ)‪ / (Active Colour‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪/ (DNIe‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ )‪(Movie Plus‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ)‪ :(Digital NR‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪ /(High‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪(Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ)‪ :(Active Colour‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭼﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ :(DNIe‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪/(Off‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ)‪/(Demo‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪) DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪) DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ‪ DNIe‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ DNIe‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ)‪(Demo‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ‪ DNIe ،‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(Digital Natural Image engine) DNIeTM‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﺮﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ DNIeTM .‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (DNIe‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ )‪ :(Movie Plus‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫‪Active Colour‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪16 : 9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٠ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:27‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 20‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ)‪ (Sound‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ ,(Mode‬ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ)‪SRS TS XT, (Equalizer‬‬
‫‪ ,XT‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ ,(Auto Volume‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ)‪,(Internal Mute‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ )‪ ,(Sound Select‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪(Reset‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫>ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ <‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ : (Mode‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ /(Standard‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ)‪/ (Music‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ / (Movie‬ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﯽ)‪ / (Speech‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ)‪ (Music‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺴﺮﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﯽ)‪ (Speech‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﺳﺖ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪ (Custom‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ S.MODE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ)‪:(Equalizer‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪10kHz/3kHz/1kHz/300Hz/100Hz Balance‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪L‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ )‪:(10kHz/3kHz/1kHz/300Hz/100Hz‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪ (Custom‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SRS TS XT ‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ‪ SRS‬ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ‪ ۵٫١‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ TruSurround .‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻼ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT، SRS‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT technology‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪..‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SRS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ :(Auto Volume‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Balance‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪10kHz 3kHz 1kHz 300Hz 100Hz‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢١ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:30‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 21‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ)‪ :(Internal Mute‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ VOL - ,VOL + ,S.MODE‬ﻭ ‪ MUTE‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ)‪ (Internal Mute‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (On‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ )‪ :(Sound Select‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪/‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ‪ PIP‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ)‪ (Game Mode‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ (Reset‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DUAL I-II‬ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪/‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ”‪ “ DUAL-I‬ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ“ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ )ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ +‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻱ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫↔‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻱ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫↔‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ NICAM‬ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪II/I‬‬
‫‪A٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪١‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫←‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪II/I‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I‬‬
‫↔‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫↔‬
‫←‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ )ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻱ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ)‪ (Mono‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﮕﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ)‪ (Mono‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٢ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:33‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 22‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Time‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER/‬‬
‫‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪,(Clock Set‬‬
‫‪)Sleep Timer‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ(‪)١ Timer ,‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪)٢ Timer ,(١‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪,(٢‬‬
‫‪)٣ Timer‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪−− : −− :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ am‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪> Clock Set ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ<‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ,‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ)‪ ,(Month‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ)‪ ,(Day‬ﺳﺎﻝ)‪, (Year‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪(Hour‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ)‪ (Minute‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪> Sleep Timer ‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ<‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺮﻯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ (١٨٠ ,١۵٠ ,١٢٠ ,٩٠ ,۶٠ ,٣٠ ,‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ / ١‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ / ٢‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On Timer‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪am/pm‬ﻭ ﺑﻠﻪ‪/‬ﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪) Off Timer‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪am/pm‬ﻭ ﺑﻠﻪ‪/‬ﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪) Repeat‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ)‪ ,(Once‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ)‪ ,(Everyday‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ~ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ)‪ ,(Mon - Fri‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ~ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ)‪ ,(Mon - Sat‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ~ ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ)‪ (Sat - Sun‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Volume‬ﺻﺪﺍ(‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Programme‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Auto Power Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪>On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ< ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٣ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:36‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 23‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪/(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(Blue Screen‬ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ)‪/(Melody‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ)‪/(Light Effect‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪ /(Energy Saving‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪(HDMI Black Level)HDMI‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪(Language‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ)‪ :(Blue Screen‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ)‪ (Blue Screen‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻠﻮﺩی)‪ :(Melody‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ)‪ :(Light Effect‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪/(Off‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ)‪/(In Standby‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪/(In Watching TV‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(Always‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ LED‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ LED: (Off‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ )‪ LED :(In Standby‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪ LED :(In Watching TV‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪ LED :(Always‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ)‪ (Light Effect‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪ :(Energy Saving‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ :(Off‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪ (Energy Saving‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﮐﻢ)‪ :(Low‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ :(Medium‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪ :(High‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪ :(HDMI Black Level)HDMI‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )‪ ١۶‬ﺗﺎ ‪ RGB (٢٣۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪)HDMI‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ (RGB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢۴ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:38‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 24‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ‪ PlayStationTM‬ﻳﺎ ‪XboxTM‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ)‪ (Game Mode‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ )ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺘﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ (Reset‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ)‪ (Game Mode‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)TV‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ)‪(Game Mode‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ)‪ (Game Mode‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢۵ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:39‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 25‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫)‪(PS-50P91FH‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ )‪ ١P‬ﺑﻪ ‪) (١P‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ »ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ« ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ »ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ« ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪SW Upgrade‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲‪ ◄ ،▼ ،‬ﻳﺎ ►‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪1‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ‪ OSD‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢۶ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:42‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)PIP‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪)PIP :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪ ,‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ)‪ ,(Source‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)‪,(Size‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪ ,(Position‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪(Programme‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ :(PIP‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪Component1, 2‬‬
‫‪HDMI1, 2, 3‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪AV2, AV1 ,‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪AV2, AV1 ,‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪AV2, AV1 ,‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪SW Upgrade‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪P 1‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (PIP‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ )‪TV/AV1/AV2: (Source‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)‪:(Size‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪:(Position‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POSITION‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪(Programme‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪)Source‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪)TV‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ P‬ﻳﺎ ‪ P‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٧ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:50‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 27‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Screen Burn Protection‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ)‪ ,(Pixel Shift‬ﮐﺎﻣ ًﻼ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪,(All White‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ)‪ ,(Signal Pattern‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮﻱ)‪(Side Gray‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ)‪ :(Pixel Shift‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ‪ PDP‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ‪٠‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ)‪ (Pixel Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On‬‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ)‪,(Horizontal Dot‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ)‪ ,(Vertical Line‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ)‪(Time‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪SW Upgrade‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ )‪(Horizontal Dot‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪(Vertical Line‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )‪) (Time‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪2:‬‬
‫‪2:‬‬
‫‪ 2 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ;‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫‪S-Video/AV1/AV2‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء‪HDMI/‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪>Pixel Shift‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ< ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ )ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮐﺎﻣ ًﻼ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ :(All White‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ)‪ :(Signal Pattern‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮﻱ)‪ :(Side Gray‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﺮﻩ)‪ :(Dark‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ :(Light‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﮐﺎﻣ ًﻼ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ (All White‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ)‪ (Signal Pattern‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﮕﺎﻝ)‪ (Signal Pattern‬ﻣﻮﺛﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٨ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:53‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 28‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟـ ‪ Samsung‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ .USB‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻧﺸﮕﺮ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﻱ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ )‪ (SW Upgrade‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ENTER/OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ...USB‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪ .“.‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪SW Upgrade‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪SW Upgrade‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪...USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ًﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﮏ ﺗﺎپ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Properties‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Display Properties‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Settings‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪Display‬‬
‫‪ ،Modes‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪)Colours‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Advanced‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Monitor‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Screen refresh rate‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪Vertical‬‬
‫‪ Frequency‬ﻭ ‪ Horizontal Frequency‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫‪ Screen refresh rate‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Properties‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺑﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٩ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:54‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 29‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻜﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪D-Sub‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪IBM‬‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪VESA CVT‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫‪350x640‬‬
‫‪400x720‬‬
‫‪480x640‬‬
‫‪480x640‬‬
‫‪480x640‬‬
‫‪600x800‬‬
‫‪600x800‬‬
‫‪600x800‬‬
‫‪768x1024‬‬
‫‪768x1024‬‬
‫‪768x1024‬‬
‫‪1024x1280‬‬
‫‪1024x1280‬‬
‫‪1200x1600‬‬
‫‪1080x1920‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪37.861‬‬
‫‪37.500‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.077‬‬
‫‪46.875‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪56.476‬‬
‫‪60.023‬‬
‫‪63.981‬‬
‫‪79.976‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪66.587‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪70.086‬‬
‫‪70.087‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪72.809‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪72.188‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪70.069‬‬
‫‪75.029‬‬
‫‪60.020‬‬
‫‪75.025‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪59.934‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪28.322‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪50.000‬‬
‫‪49.500‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪78.750‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪135.000‬‬
‫‪162.000‬‬
‫‪138.500‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ )‪(H/V‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪IBM‬‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪VESA CVT‬‬
‫‪VESA CEA‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫‪350x640‬‬
‫‪400x720‬‬
‫‪480x640‬‬
‫‪600x800‬‬
‫‪768x1024‬‬
‫‪1024x1280‬‬
‫‪1080x1920‬‬
‫‪1080x1920‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪63.981‬‬
‫‪66.587‬‬
‫‪67.500‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪70.086‬‬
‫‪70.087‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪60.020‬‬
‫‪59.934‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪28.322‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪138.500‬‬
‫‪148.500‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ )‪(H/V‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ SOG .‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٠ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:55‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 30‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪. SOURCE‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ ,(Image Lock‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪ ,(Position‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ ,(Auto Adjustment‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(Image Reset‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪/Fine :(Image Lock‬ﺧﺸﻦ)‪(Coarse‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ )ﺩﺭﺷﺖ( ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Coarse‬ﺧﺸﻦ( ﻳﺎ ‪ Fine‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪(Position‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪:(Image Reset‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪English :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻦ‬
‫‪Fine‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣١ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:58‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 31‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪. SOURCE‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Home Theatre PC‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ‪(PC‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪English :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٢ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:13:59‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 32‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ AV‬ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Samsung Electronics AV‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ١‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ]‪[٢ HDMI] ،[١ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ]‪ [٣ HDMI‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ١‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٣‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ]‪[٢ HDMI] ،[١ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ]‪ [٣ HDMI‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AV‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AV‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٣ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:01‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 33‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER/‬‬
‫‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER/‬‬
‫‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ )‪ The Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Off :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪Off :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) Auto Turn Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off :‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪)Auto turn off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪)Auto turn off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪)Auto Turn Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Select Device‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVDR1‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪DVDR2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD1‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪DVD2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ‪) ...Configuring Anynet+ connection‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪:‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ (Anynet+‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫‪)Searching Connections‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣۴ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:05‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 34‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪(View TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Select Device‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ)‪(Record‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Menu on Device‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Device Operation‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫▲‪/►/◄/▼/‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫◄◄ )ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ(‬
‫►► )ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫‪) ‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫‪) ► ‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﮑﺚ(‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﻧﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪▼/▲ CH‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪VOL +/-‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪MUTE‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،Anynet+‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ◄◄‪ ►► ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ (Record‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣۵ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:06‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 35‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Receiver‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ENTER/OK‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪,(On‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫►‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫◄‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖ ﭼﺎپ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ،WISELINK‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ PIP‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻂ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI/‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪(WISELINK‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫)‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TV‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪)View TV‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ CH, CH LIST, PRE-CH‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻧﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪Anynet‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ‪…device +‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣۶ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:06‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 36‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ‪WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ )‪ (JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ )‪ (Mp3‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی )‪ (MSC‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪) WISELINK‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ (USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ٣٢/FAT١٦‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ NTFS‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WISELINK‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ)‪ USB Mass Storage Class(MSC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ MSC .‬ﻧﻮﻋﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ MSC‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎی ‪ Thumb‬ﻭ ‪) .Flash Card Reader‬ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ USB HDD‬ﻭ‪ HUB‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﮕﺎ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ Mp3‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WISELINK‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪Mp3‬ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ ٤٤/١ ، ٣٢‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ٤٨‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻴﻨﺪ‪ JPEG .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ "ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی" ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ)‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎی )‪ PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ )‪ MTP (Media Transfer Protocol‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ '‪ '٠٠:٠٠:٠٠‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٤٠٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٧ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:07‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 37‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪(Input‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB Free‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ WISELINK‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﯽ )ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) .WISELILNK‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٨ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:12‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 38‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪٣٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Photo‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ENTER/OK ,‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ► ،▼ ،▲ .٣‬ﻭ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB Free‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪1/10 Page‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻗﺪﺭی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ jpeg‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ‪ bmp‬ﻳﺎ ‪ tiff‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ پ=ﺍﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٥‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ EXIF‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ‪PHOTO LIST‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ Start Slide Show‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (Select All‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ Start Slide Show‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫‪ Background Music‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی )‪Side Show‬‬
‫‪ (Speed، Background Music، Background Music Setting، List‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER/OK‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٩ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:19‬‬
‫‪1/10 Page‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Select All‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed : Fast‬‬
‫‪Background Music : On‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 39‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪:Slide Show Speed‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ )‪ (Fast, Normal, Slow‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed : Fast‬‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Background Music : Normal‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪: Background Music‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ )‪ (On، Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed : Fast‬‬
‫‪Background Music : Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪:Background Music Setting‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻼﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫►► ‪◄◄ 1/1 Page‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪:List‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪1/10 Page‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺭی )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ( ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪1/10 Page‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪53 KB‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪1 / 14‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٠ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:23‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 40‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪٣٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Photo‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ENTER/OK ,‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲‪ ► ،▼ ،‬ﻭ ◄ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ) ‪Start Slide Show ،Zoom،‬‬
‫‪ (Rotate ،List‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Zoom‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Zoom‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻤﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(X4 → X2 → Original‬‬
‫ ‪ : Original‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : X2‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮ ‪.x2‬‬‫ ‪ : X4‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ‪.x4‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪ ► ،▼ ،‬ﻭ ◄‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate/Start Slide Show‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Zoom‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴١ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:24‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom: Original‬‬
‫‪Rotate: Original‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom: Original‬‬
‫‪Original‬‬
‫‪Rotate: X2‬‬
‫‪Original‬‬
‫‪List X4‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 41‬‬
‫‪:Rotate‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : Original‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ ‪ : 90‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ ‪ : 180‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ ‪ : 270‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ‪ 270‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Zoom/Start Slide Show‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom: Original‬‬
‫‪Rotate: Original‬‬
‫‪Original‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫‪270Exit‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٢ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:25‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 42‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪Mp3‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪٣٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Music‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ENTER/OK ,‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ REW‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ FF‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER/OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Play،‬‬
‫‪ Repeat Music‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Select All‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB Free‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Nat King Cole-Fly me to the moon‬‬
‫‪00:04:00‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪Folder 1‬‬
‫‪00:04:01‬‬
‫‪001 Swan Song feat.TBNY‬‬
‫‪00:04:28‬‬
‫‪002 Beatles-Yesterday‬‬
‫‪00:04:12‬‬
‫‪003 Fall in Love‬‬
‫‪00:05:39‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪5959 KB‬‬
‫‪Nov 14, 2007‬‬
‫‪6/14‬‬
‫‪004 Tom Waits-Time‬‬
‫‪00:04:30‬‬
‫‪005 Chuk Mangione-Feel So good‬‬
‫‪00:05:25‬‬
‫‪006 Nat King Cole-Fly me to the moon‬‬
‫‪00:04:30‬‬
‫‪007 Ryuichi Sakamoto-Rain‬‬
‫‪00:03:54‬‬
‫‪008 Bon jovi-This ain’t a love song‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Repeat Music : Off‬‬
‫‪Select All‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫‪:Play‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪Mp3‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ STOP‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MUTE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ FF‬ﻳﺎ ‪ REW‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Repeat Music‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ On‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ STOP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ Stop‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٣ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:33‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 43‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
.‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬WISELINK ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬Setup
Photo
Music
Setup
Move
Slide Show Speed
: Fast
Background Music
: On
Enter
Return
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
: On
Screen Saver
: ۵ min
Move
Enter
‫ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬WISELINK ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬٣ ‫ ﺗﺎ‬١ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
(‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬٣٨
ENTER/OK ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬Setup ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
.‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
ENTER/ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
Slide Show Speed, Background Music,) .‫ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬OK
(Background Music Setting, Screen Saver
ENTER/ ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬،‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬OK
‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬WISELINK ‫ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬WISELINK ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
.‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
Background Music
Background Music Setting
: Fast
Fast
: On
Normal
Repeat Music
Slow
: On
Screen Saver
: ۵ min
Move
Slide Show Speed
: Fast
Background Music
: On
Off
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
On
: On
Screen Saver
: ۵ min
Move
Enter
.٢
.٣
.٤
Return
Normal ‫ ﻳﺎ‬Fast
Slide Show Speed
.١
:Slide Show Speed
‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬.‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻨﺪ‬Slow ‫ﻳﺎ‬
Return
: Background Music
.‫ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬Mp3 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬Off ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬On ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
Enter
Return
:Background Music Setting
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ‬Background Music Setting ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬Mp3 ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬.‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
◄◄ 1/1 Page ►►
Move
Enter
Return
...‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
۴۴ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01329J_Per.indd 44
2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:36
:(‫ )ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬Music Repeat
Slide Show Speed
: Fast
Background Music
: On
‫ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬Mp3 ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
.‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
Off
: On
Screen Saver
min
: ۵On
Move
Enter
Slide Show Speed
: Fast
Background Music
: On
Return
:Screen Saver
،١ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬.‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬،‫ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‬١٠ ‫ ﻳﺎ‬٥
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
: On
Screen Saver
: ۵١min
min
۵ min
١٠ min
Move
Enter
Return
۴۵ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01329J_Per.indd 45
2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:37
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺪﻛﺲ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻳﻨﺪﮐﺲ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺪﻛﺲ )ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﻣﻴﮑﺲ(‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )‪.(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)LIST‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﻐﻮ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺸﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪/‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪/‬ﺯﺭﺩ‪/‬ﺁﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴۶ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:40‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 46‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺶ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪(FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TV‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٧ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:45‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 47‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﭻ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ VCR‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠٨٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪>VCR :‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ<‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪>“VCR‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ< ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ CABLE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵١‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠۴۶‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪>Cable box :‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ<‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪>“CABLE‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ< ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٨ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:48‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 48‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٢‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۴١‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪>DVD :‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ<‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪>“DVD‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ< ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪ STB ١‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ STB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ‪ STB‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ۵١‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ‪ STB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ STB ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ STB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ‪ STB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠٧۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪STB :‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪ “STB‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٩ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:54‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 49‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
(‫)ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‬VCR
‫ﻛﺪ‬
046 041 034 019
020
025 002
038 025 005 002
064 062 037 026 018 008 007
020
072 071 056 021
075 041 019
008
059 056 021
080 021
053 039 026 019
055 049 015
017
018
056 021
056 048 034 029 025 024 021 020 018 006
076 068 057 043 041 035 021 019 017 002
026
024 018
067 052 047 003
051 048 041 029 028 024 019 018 006
015 045 034 020
058 038 033 027
025
044 033 027
059 056 025 021
025
025 018
006
037
068 037 025
021
031 025 021 006
066
052 051 029 019 003
006 002
002
026 007
026
026 007
002
034 025 024 021 020 019 006 003 002
041 038
037 026 018 008 007
033 027 023
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
MITSUBISHI
MONTGOMERY WARD
MTC
MULTITECH
NEC
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PENTAX
+PENTEX RESEARCH
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PORTLAND
PROSCAN
QUARTZ
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC
RCA
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHIMTOM
SIGNATURE
SONY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TASHIKA
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
TMK
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNITECH
VECTOR RESEARCH
VICTOR
VIDEO CONCEPTS
VIDEOSONIC
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH
‫ﮐﺪ‬
079 078 077 005 004 003 002 001 000
020
025
032 027 004
026 007
018
022
055 015 008 006 003 002
056 021
055 015 008 006 003 002
007
024 002
066 064 056 025 021 017 008 007 002
016 015 014 013 012 011 010 003
026 007
017
025
034
034 032 030 025 022 021 006 003 001
067 066 065 063 060 052 050 047 040
073 069
061 051 048 029 028 024 018
025
056 021 017 005 002
002
010 009 008 007 006
007
074 042 041 025 019
021
056 054 041 037 026 021 019 018 007 002
037 026 021 018 008 007
037 026 018 008 007
070
025
038
025
083 082 081
059 056 021
062 037 026 021 018 008 007
006
036
076 075 074 073
021
025 024 021 006
034
005
075 041 019
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
SAMSUNG
ADMIRAL
AIWA
AKAI
AUDIO DYNAMICS
BELL&HOWELL
BROKSONIC
CANDLE
CANON
CITIZEN
COLORTYME
CRAIG
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
DB
DIMENSIA
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GENERAL ELECTRIC
GO VIDEO
(LG(Goldstar
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JC PENNEY
JCL
KENWOOD
KLH
LIOYD
LOGIK
LXI
JVC
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MARTA
KONIA
ORION
MEI
MEMOREX
MGA
MIDLAND
MINOLTA
...‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
۵٠ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01329J_Per.indd 50
2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:14:59
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
(‫)ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬CABLE BOX
‫ﮐﺪ‬
023 015
043 042
043 042
022
036
016
016
032
034 033
028 023 021 019
046
045 037 035 029 017
‫ﮐﺪ‬
007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000
041
031 024 003
030 025
039 038
030 025
028 023 019
026
044 037 027 022 003
028 023 021 019
044 020 018 004
040 022 014
003
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
REGENCY
SA
SCIENTIFIC ATLAN
SPRUCER
٢٠٠٠ STARGATE
SYLVANIA
TEXSCAN
TOCOM
UNIVERSAL
VIEWSTAR
WARNER AMEX
ZENITH
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
SAMSUNG
GI
HAMLIN
HITACHI
JERROLD
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
REGAL
SAMSUNG ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﮐﺪ‬
013 008 002 001 000
013 008 004 000
013 008 003 000
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬STB
‫ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬STB
‫ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬STB
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﮐﺪ‬
073 044
042 041 040 039 038 036 021 016
016
064
018
015
064 048 047
041 040 039 038 036 033 021 017 016 015
067 042
063 050 049 046
062 061 059 058
016
066 065
066 065 053 052 051
064
057
027 020
026
031
007 006 005
064
064
060 054
072 030 029 028 017 015
066 060
057 056 055 037 021 016
068 031 024
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
(LG(Goldstar
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MACOM
MITSUBISHI
NEXT LEVEL
PHILIPS
PRIMESTAR
PANASONIC
PAYSAT
PROSCAN
RCA
RADIOSHACK
REALISTIC
STS
STAR TRAK
SKY
SKY LIFE
SHACK
STAR CHOICE
SONY
TOSHIBA
ULTIMATE TV
UNIDEN
ZENITH
‫ﮐﺪ‬
023
043
034 018
019
035
065 062 061 060 045 022 019 017 016 015
068 067 066
074
070 069
069
032 024 018
027
071 070 069 025
069
069
065
064 063 048 047 046
069
056
022
017 015
020
020
059
063
070 069
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
ALPHASTAR
ANAM
CHANNEL MASTER
CROSSDIGITAL
CHAPARRAL
DIRECT TV
DAEWOO
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
DISHPRO
DRAKE
DX ANTENNA
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESSVU
GOI
GE
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
HTS
HOME CABLE
HITACHI
HUGHES NETWORK
IQ
IQ PRISM
JANEIL
JERROID
JVC
...‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
۵١ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01329J_Per.indd 51
2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:15:01
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
(SAMSUNG ‫)ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬SAMSUNG DVD
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺪ‬
016 015 014 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‬
017
018 HDD ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
019
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬STB
020
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
021
AV ‫ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬AV
‫ﮐﺪ‬
002 001 000
004 003
006 005
011 010 009 008 007
012
013
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﮐﺪ‬
NORCENT
050 049 048
NEXT BASE
052
NEC
053
NANTAUS
144
NESA
074
105 OPTOMEDIA ELECTRONICS
OPTIVIEW
072
ONKYO
119 092 076
PHILCO
045 044
PRINCETON
047 046
PROSCAN
023
PANASONIC
138 137 136 134 124 034 024
PHILIPS
076 036
ROTEL
118 117
RIO
120
RCA
132 131 075 074 035 023
RAITE
073
ROWA
038
SAMPO
104
SONY
141 130 129 128 127 126 029 026
SHERWOOD
041 039
SVA
042
SYLVANIA
093 043
SHARP
140
SANSUI
062
SANYO
062
SHINSONIC
094
SANYO
090
THOMSON
145
TOSHIBA
076 062 028
TECHNICS
139
TVIEW
072
TOKAI
073
TEAC
096
TECHWOOD
097
TREDEX
101 099 098
URBAN CONCEPTS
076
VENTURER
075
VOCOPRO
102
YAMAHA
063 032
YAMAKAWA
073 040
XWAVE
103
ZENITH
121 076
‫ﮐﺪ‬
030
075
085
072
112 111 088 084 083 086 074 071 070
114
062
074
123 122
027
082 079 078 077 065
125 080
081
095
066
146
068 067
090
060
135 133 089 061
074 069
074
113 064
071
073
110 091
089
092
091
116 115 033 022
073
109 108 051
073
107 106 100 059
075 074
031 025
057
058
054
055
056
093 076
094 074
073
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
<‫>ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬DVD
DVDR
BD Record
VCR COMBO
VCR Record
DHR COMBO
(‫)ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬DVD
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ‬
ANAM
AUDIOVOX
AUDIOLOGIC
ANABA
APEX DIGITAL
AIWA
BROKSONIC
BLAUPUNKT
B&K
CURTIS MATHES
CYBER HOME
CLARION
CIRRUS
CINEVISION
DAEWOO
DENON
FARENHEIT
FISHER
GPX
GO VIDEO
GE
GREENHILL
HITACHI
HITEKER
HOYO
HARMAN / KARDON
IRT
INTEGRA
JBL
JVC
JATON
KENWOOD
KISS
KONKA
KLH
(LG(Goldstar
LOEWE
LASONIC
MOBILE AUTHORITY
MEMOREX
MALATA
MAGNAVOX
MINTEK
MONYKA
۵٢ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01329J_Per.indd 52
2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:15:03
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ‪( VESA‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫‪LCD-TV‬‬
‫‪PDP-TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ )‪VESA. (A * B‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪٢۶ ~ ٢٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٠ * ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪M۴‬‬
‫‪۴٠ ~ ٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠ * ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪M۶‬‬
‫‪۵٢ ~ ۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴٠٠ * ۶٠٠‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۴٠٠ * ٧٠٠‬‬
‫)‪ VESA‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫‪٧٠ ~ ۵٧‬‬
‫‪۴٠٠ * ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪~ ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ * ١۴٠٠‬‬
‫‪۵٨ ~ ۴٢‬‬
‫‪۴٠٠ * ۶٠٠‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪۴٠٠ * ٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫‪ VESA‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪~ ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠٠ * ١۴٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪M٨‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪M٨‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ VESA‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ۵٧‬ﻭ ‪ ۶٣‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪ VESA‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۵٣ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:15:04‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 53‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪PS-63P71FH‬‬
‫‪PS-50P91FH‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪.‬ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻧﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MUTE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ”‪ “+‬ﻭ ”‪ “-‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ )‪ ،STB، DVD‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Source‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ)‪ (Just Scan‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۵۴ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:15:06‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 54‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪PS-50P91FH‬‬
‫‪PS-63P71FH‬‬
‫‪ ۵٠‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫‪ ۶٣‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٩٢٠ x ۶٠ @ ١٠٨٠ Hz‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪١۵ W + ١۵ W‬‬
‫‪٩۵ X ٧٣٩ X ١٢٨٩ mm‬‬
‫‪٣٢٠ X ٨٠۴ X ١٢٨٩ mm‬‬
‫‪٨٨ X ١٠٠١ X ١۵٢٨ mm‬‬
‫‪۴٢٣ X ١٠٨٧ X ١۵٢٨ mm‬‬
‫‪۴۵ kg‬‬
‫‪۴٩ kg‬‬
‫‪۶٨ kg‬‬
‫‪٨٩ kg‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ۵٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ۴-‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١١٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩۵‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ B‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۵۵ -‬‬
‫‪2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:15:12‬‬
‫‪BN68-01329J_Per.indd 55‬‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE ‫ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬Samsung ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬
Country
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Customer Care Centre 
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/mea
BN68-01329J-02
BN68-01329J_Per.indd 2
2007-10-05 ¿ÀÀü 11:12:20
Download PDF